1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * D Language and ABI:: Controlling D ABI changes.
56 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
57 * Misc:: Everything else.
60 @node Target Structure
61 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
63 @cindex target functions
65 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
66 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
67 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
68 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
69 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
70 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
71 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
72 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
75 #include "target-def.h"
77 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
79 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
80 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
82 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
86 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
87 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
88 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
89 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
90 @code{targetm} structure.
92 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
93 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
94 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
95 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
96 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
97 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
98 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
100 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
101 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
102 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
103 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
104 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
105 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
106 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
107 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
108 default definition is used.
110 Similarly, there is a @code{targetdm} variable for hooks that are
111 specific to the D language front end, documented as ``D Target Hook''.
112 This is declared in @file{d/d-target.h}, the initializer
113 @code{TARGETDM_INITIALIZER} in @file{d/d-target-def.h}. If targets
114 initialize @code{targetdm} themselves, they should set
115 @code{target_has_targetdm=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default
119 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
121 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
123 @c prevent bad page break with this line
124 You can control the compilation driver.
126 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
127 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
128 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
130 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
131 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
132 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
133 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
134 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
135 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
137 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
138 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
139 that the other specs are easier to write.
141 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
144 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
145 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
146 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
147 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
148 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
150 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
151 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
152 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
153 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
154 everywhere it occurs.
156 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
157 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
158 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
160 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
164 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
165 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
166 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
168 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
171 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
172 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
173 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
174 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
178 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
179 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
181 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
182 for GCC to pass to front ends.
184 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
188 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
189 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
190 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
192 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
193 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
194 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
195 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
200 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
201 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
202 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
207 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
208 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
209 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
210 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
213 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
216 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
217 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
218 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
219 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
220 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
221 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
223 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
224 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
225 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
226 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
230 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
231 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
232 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
234 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
238 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
239 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
240 command given to the linker.
242 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
243 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
247 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
248 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
249 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
250 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
252 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
253 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
256 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
257 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
258 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
259 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
260 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
261 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
262 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
263 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
264 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
265 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
268 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
269 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
270 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
271 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
272 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
273 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
274 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
278 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
279 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
280 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
281 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
284 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
289 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
290 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
294 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
295 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
296 the very end of the command given to the linker.
298 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
301 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
302 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
303 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
304 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
305 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
306 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
307 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
308 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
311 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
312 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
313 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
314 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
317 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
318 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
319 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
320 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
321 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
325 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
326 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
329 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
330 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
331 string constant that provides the specification.
333 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
335 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
336 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
337 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
340 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
341 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
342 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
345 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
348 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
349 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
351 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
354 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
358 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
359 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
360 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
361 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
363 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
364 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
367 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
368 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
371 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
372 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
376 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
377 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
378 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
379 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
382 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
383 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
384 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
387 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
388 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
389 The default value of this macro is empty string.
392 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
393 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
394 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
395 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
396 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
397 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
398 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
399 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
402 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
404 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
405 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
406 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
407 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
408 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
410 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
411 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
412 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
413 @xref{Target Fragment}.
416 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
417 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
418 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
419 indicates an absolute file name.
422 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
423 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
424 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
425 when the compiler is built as a cross
426 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
427 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
430 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
431 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
432 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
433 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
434 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
435 is built as a cross compiler.
438 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
439 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
440 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
441 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
442 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
443 is built as a cross compiler.
446 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
447 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
448 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
449 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
450 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
451 is built as a cross compiler.
454 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
455 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
456 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
457 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
460 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
461 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
462 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
466 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
467 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
468 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
469 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
470 initialize the necessary environment variables.
473 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
474 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
475 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
476 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
477 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
478 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
480 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
484 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
485 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
486 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
487 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
490 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
491 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
492 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
493 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
494 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
495 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
496 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
497 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
498 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
500 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
501 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
502 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
503 for C++-only directories,
504 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
505 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
506 the array with a null element.
508 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
509 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
510 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
511 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
513 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
516 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
518 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
519 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
520 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
527 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
531 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
534 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
535 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
536 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
539 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
542 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
543 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
546 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
549 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
552 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
556 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
560 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
563 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
564 value based on the installed toolchain location.
567 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
568 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
571 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
572 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
575 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
578 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
582 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
583 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
586 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
587 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
590 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
591 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
592 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
595 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
596 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
600 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
601 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
605 @node Run-time Target
606 @section Run-time Target Specification
607 @cindex run-time target specification
608 @cindex predefined macros
609 @cindex target specifications
611 @c prevent bad page break with this line
612 Here are run-time target specifications.
614 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
615 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
616 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
617 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
618 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
619 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
620 finished command line option processing your code can use those
623 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
624 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
625 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
626 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
628 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
629 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
630 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
631 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
632 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
633 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
634 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
635 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
636 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
637 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
639 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
640 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
641 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
642 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
643 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
644 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
645 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
646 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
650 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
651 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
652 and is used for the target operating system instead.
655 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
656 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
657 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
658 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
662 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
663 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
664 any target-specific headers.
667 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
668 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
669 Its default setting is 0.
672 @cindex optional hardware or system features
673 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
675 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
676 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
677 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
678 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
679 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
680 definition does nothing but return true.
682 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
683 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
684 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
685 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
689 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
690 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
691 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
692 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
693 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
694 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
695 default definition does nothing but return false.
697 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
698 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
699 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
700 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
703 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
705 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
707 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
709 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
711 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
713 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
715 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
716 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
717 but is only used in the C
718 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
719 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
723 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
724 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
725 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
726 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
727 options are processed once
728 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
729 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
730 options passed explicitly.
732 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
733 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
734 @code{optimize} attribute.
737 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
739 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
740 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
741 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
742 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
743 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
744 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
746 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
747 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
748 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
749 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
750 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
751 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
752 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
754 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
758 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
760 @node Per-Function Data
761 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
762 @cindex per-function data
763 @cindex data structures
765 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
766 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
767 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
768 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
769 when another one comes along.
771 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
772 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
773 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
774 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
775 to their own specific data.
777 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
778 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
779 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
780 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
782 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
783 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
784 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
785 function, for level 0.
787 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
788 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
789 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
790 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
791 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
792 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
793 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
794 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
797 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
798 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
799 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
800 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
801 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
804 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
805 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
806 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
807 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
808 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
809 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
811 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
812 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
813 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
817 @section Storage Layout
818 @cindex storage layout
820 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
821 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
822 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
823 @xref{Run-time Target}.
825 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
826 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
827 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
828 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
829 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
830 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
831 macro need not be a constant.
833 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
834 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
837 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
838 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
839 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
842 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
843 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
844 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
845 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
846 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
847 macro need not be a constant.
850 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
851 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
852 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
853 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
854 the order of words in memory.
857 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
858 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
859 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
860 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
861 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
863 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
867 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
868 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
869 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
872 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
873 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
874 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
875 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
878 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
879 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
880 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
883 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
884 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
885 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
886 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
890 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
891 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
892 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
893 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
896 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
897 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
898 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
899 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
900 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
901 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
902 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
904 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
905 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
908 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
909 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
910 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
911 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
914 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
915 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
916 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
917 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
918 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
921 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
922 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
923 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
924 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
925 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
926 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
928 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
931 @hook TARGET_C_EXCESS_PRECISION
933 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
935 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
936 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
937 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
938 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
942 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
943 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
944 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
945 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
946 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
947 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
950 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
951 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
952 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
953 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
954 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
955 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
958 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
959 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
960 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
961 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
964 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
965 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
968 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
969 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
970 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
971 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
974 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
976 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
977 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
978 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
981 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
982 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
983 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
986 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
987 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
988 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
989 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
990 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
993 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
994 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
995 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
996 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
997 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
1000 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{type}, @var{computed})
1001 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} of
1002 type @var{type} if the alignment computed in the usual way (including
1003 applying of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
1004 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
1005 field alignment has not been set by the
1006 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. Note that @var{field}
1007 may be @code{NULL_TREE} in case we just query for the minimum alignment
1008 of a field of type @var{type} in structure context.
1011 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1012 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1013 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1015 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1017 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1018 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1019 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1020 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1023 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1024 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1025 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1026 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct for functions and
1027 objects with static storage duration. The alignment of automatic
1028 objects may exceed the object file format maximum up to the maximum
1029 supported by GCC. If not defined, the default value is
1030 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1032 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1033 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1034 a 32-bit host e.g.@: @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1035 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1036 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1039 @hook TARGET_LOWER_LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT
1041 @hook TARGET_STATIC_RTX_ALIGNMENT
1043 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1044 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1045 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1046 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1047 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1049 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1052 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1053 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1054 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1055 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1058 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1059 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1060 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1061 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1062 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1064 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1067 @hook TARGET_CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
1069 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1070 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1071 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1072 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1073 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1075 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1077 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1078 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1080 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1083 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1085 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1086 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1087 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1088 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1089 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1092 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1093 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1096 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1097 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1099 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1102 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1103 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1104 variable @var{decl}.
1106 If this macro is not defined, then
1107 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1110 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1111 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1113 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1116 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1117 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1118 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1119 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1121 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1124 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1125 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1126 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1128 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1131 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1132 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1133 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1135 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1136 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1139 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1140 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1141 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1142 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1145 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1146 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1147 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1149 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1150 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1151 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1152 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1153 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1155 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1156 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1157 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1158 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1160 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1163 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1164 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1166 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1167 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1168 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1169 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1171 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1172 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1173 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1175 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1176 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1177 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1179 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1180 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1181 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1200 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1201 sizeof (struct foo1));
1202 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1203 sizeof (struct foo2));
1208 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1209 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1212 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1213 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1214 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1217 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1219 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1221 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1223 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1224 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1225 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1226 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1229 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1230 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1233 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1234 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1235 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1236 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1237 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1238 (DImode)} is assumed.
1241 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1242 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1243 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1244 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1245 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1246 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1247 having its mode specified.
1249 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1250 would most commonly define this macro if the
1251 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1255 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1256 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1257 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1258 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1260 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1261 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1262 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1265 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1267 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1269 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1271 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1273 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1275 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1277 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1279 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1281 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1284 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1286 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1287 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1288 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1289 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1291 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1292 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1293 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1296 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1297 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1298 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1299 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1303 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1304 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1305 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1308 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1309 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1310 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1311 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1312 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1313 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1316 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1317 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1318 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1319 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1320 macro must be at least 64.
1323 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1324 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1325 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1326 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1329 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1330 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1331 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1332 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1335 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1336 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1337 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1340 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1341 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1342 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1346 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1347 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1348 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1352 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1353 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1354 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1355 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1358 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1359 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1360 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1361 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1364 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1365 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1366 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1367 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1370 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1371 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1372 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1373 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1376 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1377 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1378 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1379 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1382 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1383 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1384 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1385 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1388 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1389 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1390 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1391 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1394 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1395 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1396 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1397 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1400 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1401 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1402 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1403 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1404 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1405 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1406 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1409 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1410 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1411 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1412 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1413 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1417 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1418 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1419 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1420 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1421 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1424 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1427 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1428 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1429 contents of the string.
1431 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1432 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1433 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1434 of the data type names defined in the function
1435 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1436 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1437 compiler to crash on startup.
1439 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1444 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1445 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1446 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1447 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1450 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1452 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1455 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1456 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1457 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1458 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1459 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1461 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1465 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1466 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1467 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1470 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1473 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1474 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1475 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1480 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1481 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1482 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1483 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1486 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1490 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1491 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1492 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1493 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1495 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1496 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1497 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1500 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1501 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1502 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1503 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1504 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1506 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1507 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1508 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1512 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1518 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1519 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1520 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1521 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1522 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1523 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1524 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1525 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1527 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1528 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1529 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1530 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1531 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1532 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1533 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1534 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1535 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1536 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1537 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1538 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1539 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1540 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1541 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1542 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1543 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1544 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1545 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1546 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1547 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1548 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1550 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1551 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1552 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1553 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1554 these macros are null pointers.
1557 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1558 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1565 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1572 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1573 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1574 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1575 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1576 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1577 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1578 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1579 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1581 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1582 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1583 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1584 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1585 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1586 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1587 architecture, you should define this macro to
1588 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1590 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1591 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1592 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1593 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1596 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1597 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1598 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1599 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1600 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1601 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1602 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1604 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1605 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1608 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1609 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1610 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1611 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1612 when special alignment is necessary. */
1615 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1616 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1617 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1618 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1619 of words in each data entry.
1623 @section Register Usage
1624 @cindex register usage
1626 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1627 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1629 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1630 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1631 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1632 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1633 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1636 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1637 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1638 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1639 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1640 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1643 @node Register Basics
1644 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1646 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1647 Registers have various characteristics.
1649 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1650 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1651 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1652 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1653 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1656 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1657 @cindex fixed register
1658 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1659 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1660 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1661 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1662 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1663 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1664 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1666 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1667 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1668 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1670 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1671 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1672 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1673 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1674 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1677 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1678 @cindex call-used register
1679 @cindex call-clobbered register
1680 @cindex call-saved register
1681 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1682 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1683 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1684 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1687 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1688 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1689 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1691 Exactly one of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} and @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}
1692 must be defined. Modern ports should define @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}.
1695 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1696 @cindex call-used register
1697 @cindex call-clobbered register
1698 @cindex call-saved register
1699 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1700 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1701 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1703 Exactly one of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} and @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}
1704 must be defined. Modern ports should define @code{CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS}.
1707 @cindex call-used register
1708 @cindex call-clobbered register
1709 @cindex call-saved register
1710 @hook TARGET_FNTYPE_ABI
1712 @hook TARGET_INSN_CALLEE_ABI
1714 @cindex call-used register
1715 @cindex call-clobbered register
1716 @cindex call-saved register
1717 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1719 @hook TARGET_GET_MULTILIB_ABI_NAME
1722 @findex call_used_regs
1725 @findex reg_class_contents
1726 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1728 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1729 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1730 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1731 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1732 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1736 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1737 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1738 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1739 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1740 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1744 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1745 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1746 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1747 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1748 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1753 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1754 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1757 @node Allocation Order
1758 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1759 @cindex order of register allocation
1760 @cindex register allocation order
1762 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1763 Registers are allocated in order.
1765 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1766 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1767 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1768 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1770 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1771 (all else being equal).
1773 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1774 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1775 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1776 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1777 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1780 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1781 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1782 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1784 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1785 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1786 register; and so on.
1788 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1789 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1791 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1794 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1795 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1796 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1797 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1798 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1799 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1800 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1803 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1804 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1805 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1806 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1807 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1808 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1809 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1810 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1812 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1815 @node Values in Registers
1816 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1818 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1819 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1820 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1822 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1824 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1825 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1826 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1827 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1828 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1829 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1830 @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1832 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1833 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1836 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1837 @code{subreg_get_info}
1838 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1839 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1840 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1841 registers and so not be representable.
1844 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1845 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1846 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1847 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1848 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1851 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1852 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1853 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1854 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1855 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1856 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1857 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1860 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1862 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1863 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1864 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1866 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1867 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1870 The default is always nonzero.
1873 @hook TARGET_MODES_TIEABLE_P
1875 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1877 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1878 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1879 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1880 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1883 @node Leaf Functions
1884 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1886 @cindex leaf functions
1887 @cindex functions, leaf
1888 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1889 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1890 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1891 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1894 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1895 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1896 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1897 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1898 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1901 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1902 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1903 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1906 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1907 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1908 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1911 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1912 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1913 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1914 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1917 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1918 the treatment of leaf functions.
1921 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1922 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1923 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1925 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1926 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
1927 will cause the compiler to abort.
1929 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1930 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1934 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1935 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1936 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
1937 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
1938 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
1939 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
1940 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
1941 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
1942 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
1943 functions which only use leaf registers.
1944 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
1945 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
1946 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1947 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1948 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1950 @node Stack Registers
1951 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1953 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1954 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
1955 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
1958 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1959 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
1960 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
1961 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
1962 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
1963 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
1964 with it, as well as defining these macros.
1967 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1970 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
1971 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
1972 the machine has any stack-like registers.
1975 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
1976 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1980 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
1981 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1985 @node Register Classes
1986 @section Register Classes
1987 @cindex register class definitions
1988 @cindex class definitions, register
1990 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1991 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1992 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1993 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1995 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1996 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1997 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2001 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2002 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2003 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2004 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2006 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2007 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2008 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2009 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2010 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2013 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2014 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2016 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2017 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2018 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2019 them in operand constraints.
2021 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2022 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2023 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2024 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2027 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2028 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2029 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2030 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2031 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2032 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2033 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2035 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2036 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2037 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2040 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2041 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2042 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2043 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2044 specify this requirement is with @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2046 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2047 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2048 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2049 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2050 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2051 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2052 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2053 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2054 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2056 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2057 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2058 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2059 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2060 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2061 tells how many classes there are.
2063 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2064 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2065 in many of the tables described below.
2068 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2069 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2072 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2076 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2077 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2078 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2081 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2082 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2083 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2084 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2085 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2087 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2088 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2089 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2090 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2091 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2092 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2096 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2097 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2098 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2099 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2103 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2104 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2105 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2106 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2109 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2110 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2111 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2112 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2113 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2116 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2117 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2118 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2119 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2120 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2123 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2124 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2125 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2126 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2127 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2128 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2129 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2130 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2131 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2134 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2135 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2136 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2137 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2138 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2141 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2142 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2143 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2146 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2147 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2148 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2149 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2150 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2151 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2152 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2153 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2154 @code{address_operand}.
2157 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2158 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2159 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2160 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2161 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2162 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2163 than other base register uses.
2165 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2166 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2169 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2170 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2171 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2172 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2173 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2174 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2175 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2176 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2177 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2178 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2179 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2180 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2181 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2184 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2185 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2186 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2187 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2188 allocated such a hard register.
2190 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2191 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2192 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2193 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2194 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2195 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2196 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2197 only if neither labeling works.
2200 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2202 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2204 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2205 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2206 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2207 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2208 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2212 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2215 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2216 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2217 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2218 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2219 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2221 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2222 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2223 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2224 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2225 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2226 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2227 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2228 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant cannot be loaded
2229 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2230 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2231 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2233 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2234 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2235 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2236 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2237 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2238 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2241 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2243 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2244 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2245 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2246 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2249 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2250 there are certain modes that simply cannot go in certain reload classes.
2252 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2255 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2256 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2259 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2261 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2262 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2263 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2264 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2265 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2267 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2268 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2269 reload phase that it may
2270 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2271 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2272 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2273 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2274 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2275 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2277 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2278 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2279 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2280 class required. If the
2281 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2282 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2285 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2286 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2287 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2288 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2289 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2291 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2292 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2293 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2294 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2295 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2296 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2299 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2301 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2302 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2303 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2304 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2305 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2307 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2308 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2309 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2310 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2312 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2313 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2314 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2315 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2316 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2317 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2321 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2323 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2324 Normally when @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2325 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2326 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2327 defined by this macro.
2329 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2330 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2333 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2335 @hook TARGET_SELECT_EARLY_REMAT_MODES
2337 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2339 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2341 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2342 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2343 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2345 This is closely related to the macro @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2346 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2347 should be the maximum value of @code{TARGET_HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2348 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2350 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2354 @hook TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
2356 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2360 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2362 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2364 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2366 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2368 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2370 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2372 @hook TARGET_ADDITIONAL_ALLOCNO_CLASS_P
2374 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2376 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_PRESSURE_CLASSES
2378 @node Stack and Calling
2379 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2380 @cindex calling conventions
2382 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2383 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2387 * Exception Handling::
2392 * Register Arguments::
2394 * Aggregate Return::
2399 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2400 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2401 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2405 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2406 @cindex stack frame layout
2407 @cindex frame layout
2409 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2410 Here is the basic stack layout.
2412 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2413 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2414 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2417 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2418 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2419 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2420 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2422 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2423 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2424 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2425 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2426 space for the next item on the stack.
2428 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2429 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2430 which is often wrong.
2433 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2434 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2435 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2438 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2439 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2440 addresses on the stack.
2443 @hook TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2445 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2446 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2447 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2449 On ports where @code{TARGET_STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2450 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2451 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2452 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2455 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2456 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2457 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2458 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2460 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2461 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2464 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2465 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2466 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2469 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2470 the first argument's address.
2473 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2474 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2475 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2477 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2478 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2479 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2482 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2483 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2484 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2485 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2486 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2487 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2488 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2491 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2492 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2493 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2494 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2497 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2498 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2499 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2502 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2503 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2504 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2505 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2506 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2507 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2510 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2512 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2513 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2514 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2515 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2516 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2517 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2520 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2521 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2522 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2523 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2524 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2525 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2527 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2528 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2529 determine the return address of other frames.
2532 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2533 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2534 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2535 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2538 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2539 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2540 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2541 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2542 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2545 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2546 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2548 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2549 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2552 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2553 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2554 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2555 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2556 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2558 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2559 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2560 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2564 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2565 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2566 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2567 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2568 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2569 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2572 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2574 @hook TARGET_DWARF_POLY_INDETERMINATE_VALUE
2576 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2577 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2578 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2579 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2580 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2581 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2583 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2584 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2587 @defmac DEFAULT_INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2588 Like @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}, but must be the same for all
2589 functions of the same ABI, and when using GAS @code{.cfi_*} directives
2590 must also agree with the default CFI GAS emits. Define this macro
2591 only if @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} can have different values
2592 between different functions of the same ABI or when
2593 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET} does not agree with GAS default CFI.
2596 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2597 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2598 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2599 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2600 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2601 during virtual register instantiation.
2603 The default value for this macro is
2604 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2605 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2606 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2607 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2608 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2610 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2611 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2615 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2616 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2617 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2618 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2619 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2621 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2622 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2623 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2624 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2625 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2626 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2630 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2631 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2632 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2633 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2634 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2637 @node Exception Handling
2638 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2639 @cindex exception handling
2641 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2642 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2643 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2644 @var{N} registers are usable.
2646 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2647 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2648 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2649 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2650 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2652 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2653 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2656 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2657 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2658 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2659 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2660 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2662 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2663 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2665 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2666 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2667 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2668 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2669 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2670 that provided by DWARF 2.
2673 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2674 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2675 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2676 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2678 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2679 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2680 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2681 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2682 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2683 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2686 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2687 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2688 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2690 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2691 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2694 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2695 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2696 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2697 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2698 using it to return to the exception handler.
2701 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2702 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2703 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2704 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2705 and so may be read-only.
2707 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2708 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2709 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2710 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2712 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2713 represented directly.
2716 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2717 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2718 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2719 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2720 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2722 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2723 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2724 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2728 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2729 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2730 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2731 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2732 through signal frames.
2734 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2735 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2736 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2737 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2738 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2739 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2740 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2741 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2742 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2744 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2745 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2748 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2749 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2750 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2751 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2753 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2754 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2755 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2756 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2757 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2758 be updated in @var{fs}.
2761 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2762 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2763 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2764 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2767 @node Stack Checking
2768 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2770 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2771 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2776 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2777 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2778 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2779 other special processing.
2782 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2783 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2784 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2785 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2786 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2787 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2791 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2792 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2795 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2796 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2797 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2798 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2800 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2801 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2802 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2803 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2804 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2805 value of this macro is zero.
2808 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2809 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2810 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2811 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2812 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2815 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2816 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2817 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2818 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2819 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2820 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2823 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2824 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2825 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2826 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2827 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2828 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2829 default value of this macro is zero.
2832 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2833 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2834 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2835 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2836 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2837 architectures and operating systems.
2840 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2841 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2842 in the opposite case.
2844 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2845 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2846 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2847 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2848 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2849 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2850 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2853 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2854 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2855 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2856 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2857 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2858 use the default of four words.
2861 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2862 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2863 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2864 @option{-fstack-check}.
2865 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2866 normally not need to override that default.
2869 @hook TARGET_STACK_CLASH_PROTECTION_ALLOCA_PROBE_RANGE
2872 @node Frame Registers
2873 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2875 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2876 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2878 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2879 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2880 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2881 the hardware determines which register this is.
2884 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2885 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2886 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2887 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2888 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2891 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2892 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2893 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2894 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2895 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2896 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2897 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2898 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2899 used for the frame pointer.
2901 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2902 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2903 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2904 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2905 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2906 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2907 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2909 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2910 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2913 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2914 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2915 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2916 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2917 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2918 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2919 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2920 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2921 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2924 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2925 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2926 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
2927 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2928 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2929 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2932 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
2933 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
2934 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
2935 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
2936 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
2937 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
2940 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2941 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2942 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2943 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2944 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2945 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2946 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2948 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2949 address from the stack.
2952 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2953 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2954 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2955 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2956 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2957 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2958 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2961 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2963 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2964 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
2967 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
2969 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2970 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
2971 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
2972 DWARF2 exception handling.
2974 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
2975 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
2976 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
2977 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
2978 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
2979 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
2980 registers that are not call-saved.
2982 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2983 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
2986 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
2988 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
2989 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
2991 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
2992 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
2995 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
2997 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
2998 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
2999 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3000 column number to use instead.
3003 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3005 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3006 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3007 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3008 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3009 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3013 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3015 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3016 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3017 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3018 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3019 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3023 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3025 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3026 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3027 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3028 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3032 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3034 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3035 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3036 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3037 defined and 0 otherwise.
3041 @defmac DWARF_LAZY_REGISTER_VALUE (@var{regno}, @var{value})
3042 Define this macro if the target has pseudo DWARF registers whose
3043 values need to be computed lazily on demand by the unwinder (such as when
3044 referenced in a CFA expression). The macro returns true if @var{regno}
3045 is such a register and stores its value in @samp{*@var{value}} if so.
3049 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3051 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3052 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3054 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3056 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3057 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3058 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3060 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3061 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3063 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3064 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3065 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3066 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3067 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3069 In this case, you might specify:
3071 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3072 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3073 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3074 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3077 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3078 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3081 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3083 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3084 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3085 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3086 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3087 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3090 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_FRAME_LAYOUT
3092 @node Stack Arguments
3093 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3094 @cindex arguments on stack
3095 @cindex stack arguments
3097 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3098 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3099 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3101 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3104 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3106 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3107 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3108 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3109 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3112 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3113 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3114 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3115 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3116 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3119 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3120 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3121 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3123 On some machines, the definition
3126 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3130 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3131 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3132 alignment. Then the definition should be
3135 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3138 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3141 @findex outgoing_args_size
3142 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3143 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3144 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3145 will be computed and placed into
3146 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3147 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3148 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3150 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3154 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3155 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3156 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3159 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3160 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3161 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3162 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3165 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3166 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3169 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3170 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3172 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3173 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3174 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3175 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3176 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3179 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3180 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3181 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3182 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3183 if the function called is a library function.
3185 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3186 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3187 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3190 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3191 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3192 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3193 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3194 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3196 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3197 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3198 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3199 stack in its natural location.
3202 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3204 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3205 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3206 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3207 when compiling a function call.
3209 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3210 have been accumulated.
3212 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3213 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3214 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3215 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3219 @node Register Arguments
3220 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3221 @cindex arguments in registers
3222 @cindex registers arguments
3224 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3225 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3228 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3230 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3232 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3234 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3236 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3238 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3240 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3242 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3244 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3245 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3246 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3247 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3248 of bytes of argument so far.
3250 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3251 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3252 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3253 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3254 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3255 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3258 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3259 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3260 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3261 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3262 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3263 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3264 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3267 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3268 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3269 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3270 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3271 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3272 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3273 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3274 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3275 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3276 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3277 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3278 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3279 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3281 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3282 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3283 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3284 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3285 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3286 never both of them at once.
3289 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3290 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3291 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3292 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3293 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3294 0)} is used instead.
3297 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3298 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3299 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3300 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3302 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3303 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3304 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3305 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3306 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3307 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3310 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3312 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET
3314 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3316 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3317 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3318 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3319 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3320 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3321 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3324 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3325 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3326 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3327 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3328 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3329 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3330 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3331 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3335 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3337 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3339 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3340 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3341 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3342 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3343 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3344 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3348 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3350 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3352 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3354 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3356 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3358 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3360 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3362 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3364 @hook TARGET_TRANSLATE_MODE_ATTRIBUTE
3366 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3368 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3370 @hook TARGET_COMPATIBLE_VECTOR_TYPES_P
3372 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE
3374 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3376 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3378 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3380 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_BUILTIN_P
3382 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3385 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3386 @cindex return values in registers
3387 @cindex values, returned by functions
3388 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3390 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3391 values---values that can fit in registers.
3393 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3395 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3396 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3397 a new target instead.
3400 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3401 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3402 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3404 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3405 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3406 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3410 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3412 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3413 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3414 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3416 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3417 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3418 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3422 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3425 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3426 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3427 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3429 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3430 for a new target instead.
3433 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3435 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3436 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3437 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3438 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3441 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3443 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3445 @node Aggregate Return
3446 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3447 @cindex aggregates as return values
3448 @cindex large return values
3449 @cindex returning aggregate values
3450 @cindex structure value address
3452 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3453 cases), the value is not returned according to
3454 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3455 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3456 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3459 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3462 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3464 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3465 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3466 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3467 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3468 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3469 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3472 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3475 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3477 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3478 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3479 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3480 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3482 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3483 pass an address to the subroutine.
3485 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3486 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3489 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3491 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3493 @hook TARGET_EMPTY_RECORD_P
3495 @hook TARGET_WARN_PARAMETER_PASSING_ABI
3498 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3500 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3501 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3502 must live across calls.
3504 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3505 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3506 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3507 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3508 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3509 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3512 @node Function Entry
3513 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3514 @cindex function entry and exit
3518 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3519 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3521 @hook TARGET_ASM_PRINT_PATCHABLE_FUNCTION_ENTRY
3523 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3525 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3527 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3529 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3533 @findex pretend_args_size
3534 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3535 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3536 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3537 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3538 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3539 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3540 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3541 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3542 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3543 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3546 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3547 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3548 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3549 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3550 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3554 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3555 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3556 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3557 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3560 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3561 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3562 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3563 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3566 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3567 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3568 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3569 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3570 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3573 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3574 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3575 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3576 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3579 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3580 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3581 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3582 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3585 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3586 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3587 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3588 on entry to an exception edge.
3591 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3593 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3596 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3597 @cindex profiling, code generation
3599 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3601 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3602 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3603 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3606 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3607 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3608 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3609 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3611 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3612 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3613 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3614 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3617 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3618 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3619 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3620 not support profiling.
3623 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3624 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3625 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3626 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3627 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3628 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3631 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3632 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3633 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3636 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3639 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3642 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3644 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3646 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3648 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3650 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3651 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3652 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3654 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3655 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3656 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3657 up the static chain, etc.
3659 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3660 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3661 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3662 independent parts of GCC.
3664 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3665 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3666 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3667 paths where this would unnecessary.
3669 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3670 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3671 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3672 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3675 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3677 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3679 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3681 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3683 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3685 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3687 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3688 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3689 @cindex stack smashing protection
3691 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3693 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3695 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_RUNTIME_ENABLED_P
3697 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3699 @hook TARGET_GET_VALID_OPTION_VALUES
3701 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3702 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3703 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3705 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3708 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3709 @cindex varargs implementation
3711 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3712 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3713 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3714 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3715 conditionals to include it.
3717 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3718 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3719 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3720 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3721 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3722 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3724 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3725 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3728 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3729 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3730 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3731 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3732 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3734 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3735 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3736 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3737 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3739 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3740 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3741 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3742 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3743 to use them for its own purposes.
3744 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3748 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3749 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3750 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3751 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3752 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3753 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3754 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3755 of the current function.
3758 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3759 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3760 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3761 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3762 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3763 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3765 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3766 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3767 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3769 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3770 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3773 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3775 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3777 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3779 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3781 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3783 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3785 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3787 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3789 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3791 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3793 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3796 @section Support for Nested Functions
3797 @cindex support for nested functions
3798 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3799 @cindex descriptors for nested functions
3800 @cindex nested functions, support for
3802 Taking the address of a nested function requires special compiler
3803 handling to ensure that the static chain register is loaded when
3804 the function is invoked via an indirect call.
3806 GCC has traditionally supported nested functions by creating an
3807 executable @dfn{trampoline} at run time when the address of a nested
3808 function is taken. This is a small piece of code which normally
3809 resides on the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function.
3810 The trampoline loads the static chain register and then jumps to the
3811 real address of the nested function.
3813 The use of trampolines requires an executable stack, which is a
3814 security risk. To avoid this problem, GCC also supports another
3815 strategy: using descriptors for nested functions. Under this model,
3816 taking the address of a nested function results in a pointer to a
3817 non-executable function descriptor object. Initializing the static chain
3818 from the descriptor is handled at indirect call sites.
3820 On some targets, including HPPA and IA-64, function descriptors may be
3821 mandated by the ABI or be otherwise handled in a target-specific way
3822 by the back end in its code generation strategy for indirect calls.
3823 GCC also provides its own generic descriptor implementation to support the
3824 @option{-fno-trampolines} option. In this case runtime detection of
3825 function descriptors at indirect call sites relies on descriptor
3826 pointers being tagged with a bit that is never set in bare function
3827 addresses. Since GCC's generic function descriptors are
3828 not ABI-compliant, this option is typically used only on a
3829 per-language basis (notably by Ada) or when it can otherwise be
3830 applied to the whole program.
3832 Define the following hook if your backend either implements ABI-specified
3833 descriptor support, or can use GCC's generic descriptor implementation
3834 for nested functions.
3836 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3838 The following macros tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and
3839 initialize an executable trampoline. You can also use this interface
3840 if your back end needs to create ABI-specified non-executable descriptors; in
3841 this case the "trampoline" created is the descriptor containing data only.
3843 The instructions in an executable trampoline must do two things: load
3844 a constant address into the static chain register, and jump to the real
3845 address of the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k,
3846 this requires two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the
3847 two addresses exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands.
3848 On RISC machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a
3849 register in two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate
3852 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3853 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3854 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3855 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3856 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3857 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3860 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3862 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3863 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3864 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3867 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3868 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3871 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3872 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3874 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3875 is used for aligning trampolines.
3878 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3880 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3882 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3883 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3884 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3885 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3887 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3888 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3889 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3890 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3891 latter makes initialization faster.
3893 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3894 the following macro.
3896 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3897 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3898 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3899 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3900 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3903 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3904 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3905 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3906 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3907 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3909 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3910 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3911 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3912 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3913 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3915 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3916 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3917 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3918 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3919 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3920 special assembler code.
3924 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3925 @cindex library subroutine names
3926 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3928 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3929 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3931 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3932 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3933 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3934 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3935 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3938 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3939 @findex init_one_libfunc
3940 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3942 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3944 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3945 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3946 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3947 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
3950 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
3951 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
3952 don't need to define this macro.
3955 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
3956 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
3957 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
3958 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
3959 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
3960 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
3961 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
3962 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
3965 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
3966 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
3967 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3968 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
3969 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
3970 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
3973 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
3976 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
3977 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
3978 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
3979 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
3982 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
3983 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
3984 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
3985 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
3986 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
3989 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
3990 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
3991 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
3992 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
3993 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
3994 macro, a reasonable default is used.
3997 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
3999 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FAST_FUNCTION
4001 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4002 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4003 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4004 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4005 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4006 the NeXT runtime installed.
4008 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4009 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4010 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4012 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4013 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4016 @node Addressing Modes
4017 @section Addressing Modes
4018 @cindex addressing modes
4020 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4021 This is about addressing modes.
4023 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4024 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4025 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4026 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4027 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4028 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4031 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4032 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4033 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4034 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4035 the size of the memory operand.
4038 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4039 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4040 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4041 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4044 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4045 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4046 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4047 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4048 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4049 constant addresses are supported.
4052 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4053 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4054 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4055 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4056 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4057 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4060 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4061 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4062 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4063 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4067 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4069 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4070 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4071 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4072 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4073 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4074 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4075 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4076 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4077 @code{'m'} constraint.
4080 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4081 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4082 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4083 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4084 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4086 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4087 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4089 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4090 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4093 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4095 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4096 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4097 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4098 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4099 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4100 performance reasons.
4102 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4103 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4104 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4105 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4106 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4107 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4108 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4111 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4112 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4113 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4114 of reload internals.
4116 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4117 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4118 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4121 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4122 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4123 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4125 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4126 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4127 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4128 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4131 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4132 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4133 the address has become legitimate.
4136 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4137 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4138 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4139 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4140 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4141 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4144 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4146 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4148 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4150 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4152 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4154 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4156 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4158 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4160 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4162 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4164 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
4166 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4168 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST
4170 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4172 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4174 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4176 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4178 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SPLIT_REDUCTION
4180 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_MODES
4182 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_RELATED_MODE
4184 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4186 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_EMPTY_MASK_IS_EXPENSIVE
4188 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4190 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4192 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4194 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4196 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4198 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4200 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4202 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4204 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4206 @hook TARGET_SIMT_VF
4208 @hook TARGET_OMP_DEVICE_KIND_ARCH_ISA
4210 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4212 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4214 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4216 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4218 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_ELSE_VALUE
4220 @node Anchored Addresses
4221 @section Anchored Addresses
4222 @cindex anchored addresses
4223 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4225 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4226 For example, if we have:
4230 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4233 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4234 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4235 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4236 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4242 register int *xr = &x;
4243 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4247 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4248 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4250 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4251 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4252 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4253 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4255 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4257 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4259 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4261 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4263 @node Condition Code
4264 @section Condition Code Status
4265 @cindex condition code status
4267 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4268 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4270 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4271 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4272 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4273 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4274 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4275 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4278 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4279 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4280 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4281 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4282 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4283 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4285 These restrictions can prevent important
4286 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4287 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4288 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4289 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4290 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4292 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4293 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4294 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4295 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4296 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4297 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4298 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4300 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4301 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4302 interested in most macros in this section.
4305 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4306 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4309 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4310 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4314 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4315 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4316 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4317 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4318 currently based, and several standard flags.
4320 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4321 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4322 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4324 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4325 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4326 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4328 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4331 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4332 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4333 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4334 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4335 define this macro to initialize it.
4337 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4340 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4341 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4342 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4343 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4344 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4347 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4349 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4350 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4351 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4352 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4353 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4354 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4355 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4356 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4357 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4358 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4359 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4360 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4361 condition code value.
4363 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4364 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4365 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4366 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4367 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4368 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4369 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4371 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4372 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4373 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4374 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4377 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4378 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4382 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4383 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4384 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4385 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4386 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4387 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4388 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4389 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4390 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4391 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g.@: a signed or an
4392 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4394 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4395 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4396 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4397 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4398 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4399 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4400 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4406 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4407 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4414 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4415 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4418 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4419 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4420 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4421 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4422 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4423 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4424 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4427 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4428 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4431 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4432 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4435 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4437 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4438 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4439 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4440 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4441 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4443 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4444 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4445 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4446 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4449 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4450 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4454 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4455 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4456 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4457 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4458 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4459 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4460 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4464 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4465 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4466 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4470 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4472 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4474 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4477 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4478 @cindex costs of instructions
4479 @cindex relative costs
4480 @cindex speed of instructions
4482 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4483 on the target machine.
4485 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4486 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4487 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4488 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4489 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4492 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4493 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4494 registers if they are not general registers.
4496 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4497 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4498 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4499 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4500 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4501 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4503 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4504 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4507 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4509 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4510 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4511 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4512 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4513 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4514 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4515 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4517 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4518 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4519 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4520 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4521 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4522 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4524 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4525 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4526 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4527 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4528 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4529 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4530 are the same as to this macro.
4532 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4533 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4536 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4538 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4539 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4540 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4541 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4542 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4543 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4544 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4545 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4548 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4549 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4552 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4553 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4554 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4555 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4556 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4557 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4559 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4560 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4561 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4562 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4563 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4564 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4567 @hook TARGET_SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4569 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4570 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4571 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4572 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4573 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4575 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4576 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4577 the number of such sequences.
4579 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4580 optimized for speed rather than size.
4582 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4585 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4587 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4589 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4590 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4591 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4594 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4595 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4596 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4597 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4600 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4601 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4602 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4603 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4606 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4607 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4608 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4609 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4610 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4612 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4613 optimized for speed rather than size.
4615 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4618 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4619 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4620 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4621 a block set insn or a library call.
4622 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4623 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4625 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4626 optimized for speed rather than size.
4628 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4631 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4632 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4633 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4634 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4637 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4638 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4639 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4640 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4643 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4644 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4645 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4646 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4649 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4650 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4651 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4652 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4655 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4656 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4657 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4658 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4661 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4662 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4663 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4664 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4667 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4668 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4669 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4670 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4673 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4674 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4675 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4676 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4679 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4680 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4681 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4684 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4685 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4686 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4687 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4690 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4692 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4694 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4696 @hook TARGET_INSN_COST
4698 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4700 @hook TARGET_NOCE_CONVERSION_PROFITABLE_P
4702 @hook TARGET_NEW_ADDRESS_PROFITABLE_P
4704 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4706 @hook TARGET_ESTIMATED_POLY_VALUE
4709 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4711 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4712 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4713 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4714 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4716 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4718 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4720 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4722 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4724 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4726 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4728 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4730 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4732 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4734 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4736 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4738 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4740 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4742 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4744 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4746 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4748 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4750 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4752 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4754 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4756 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4758 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4760 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4762 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4764 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4766 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4768 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4770 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4772 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4774 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4776 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4778 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4780 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4782 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4784 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4786 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4788 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4790 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4792 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4794 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CAN_SPECULATE_INSN
4796 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4798 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4800 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4802 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4804 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4806 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4808 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4811 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4812 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4813 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4815 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4816 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4817 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4818 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4819 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4822 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4823 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4824 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4825 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4826 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4827 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4828 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4830 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4831 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4832 to be string literals.
4834 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4835 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4836 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4837 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4839 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4840 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4841 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4842 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4843 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4844 reuse @code{text_section}.
4846 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4847 if the target does not provide them.
4849 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4850 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4851 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4852 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4855 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4856 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4857 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4858 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4861 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4862 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4863 executed functions in the program.
4866 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4867 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4868 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4869 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4872 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4873 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4874 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4875 initialized, writable small data.
4878 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4879 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4880 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4884 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4885 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4886 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4887 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4888 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4889 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4890 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4894 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4895 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4896 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4897 uninitialized, writable small data.
4900 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4901 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4902 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4903 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4906 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4907 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4908 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4909 default is @code{'T'}.
4912 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4913 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4914 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4915 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4916 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4917 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4920 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4921 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4922 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4923 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4924 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4925 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4928 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4929 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4930 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4931 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4932 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4933 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4936 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4937 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4938 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4939 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4940 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4941 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4944 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4945 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4946 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
4947 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
4950 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4951 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4952 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4953 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4954 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4955 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4956 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4957 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4958 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4959 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4962 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4963 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4964 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4965 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4966 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4967 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4968 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4969 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4970 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4971 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4972 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4975 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4976 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4977 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4978 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4979 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4982 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4983 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4984 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4985 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4986 readonly data section is used.
4988 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4991 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4993 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
4995 @hook TARGET_ASM_GENERATE_PIC_ADDR_DIFF_VEC
4997 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
4999 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5000 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5001 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5003 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5004 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5005 it is unlikely to be called.
5008 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5010 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5012 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5014 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5016 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5018 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5020 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5022 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5024 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5026 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5028 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5030 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5032 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5036 @section Position Independent Code
5037 @cindex position independent code
5040 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5041 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5042 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5043 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5044 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5045 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5046 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5047 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5049 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5050 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5052 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5053 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5054 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5055 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5056 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5057 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5058 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5059 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5060 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5063 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5064 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5065 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5066 the default is zero. Do not define
5067 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5070 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5071 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5072 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5073 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5074 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5075 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5076 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5077 position independent code.
5080 @node Assembler Format
5081 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5083 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5084 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5088 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5089 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5090 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5091 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5092 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5093 and termination routines.
5094 * Macros for Initialization::
5095 Specific macros that control the handling of
5096 initialization and termination routines.
5097 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5098 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5099 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5100 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5103 @node File Framework
5104 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5105 @cindex assembler format
5106 @cindex output of assembler code
5108 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5109 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5111 @findex default_file_start
5112 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5114 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5116 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5118 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5120 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5121 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5122 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5123 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5124 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5125 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5129 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5131 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5133 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5135 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5136 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5137 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5138 the end of the line.
5142 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5143 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5144 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5145 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5146 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5150 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5151 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5152 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5153 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5156 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5157 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5158 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5159 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5161 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5162 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5165 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5167 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5169 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5170 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5171 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5172 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5173 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5174 of the filename using this macro.
5177 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5179 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5181 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5183 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5185 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5186 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5187 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5190 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5191 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5193 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5195 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5197 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5201 @subsection Output of Data
5204 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5206 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5208 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5210 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5212 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5213 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5214 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5215 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5216 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5218 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5219 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5220 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5223 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5224 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5225 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5226 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5229 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5230 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5231 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5232 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5233 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5234 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5235 pool before the function.
5238 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5239 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5240 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5241 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5242 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5243 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5244 immediately after this call.
5246 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5250 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5251 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5252 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5253 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5255 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5256 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5257 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5258 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5259 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5262 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5263 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5264 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5265 Here is how to do this:
5268 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5271 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5272 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5273 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5275 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5278 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5279 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5280 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5281 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5282 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5283 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5285 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5289 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5290 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5291 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5292 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5293 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5295 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5296 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5299 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5301 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5302 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5304 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5305 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5306 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5307 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5308 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5309 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5310 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5311 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5312 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5313 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5314 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5315 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5316 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5317 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5318 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5319 on the host machine.
5321 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5322 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5326 @node Uninitialized Data
5327 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5329 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5330 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5332 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5333 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5334 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5335 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5336 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5337 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5338 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5339 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5340 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5341 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5342 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5343 an ordinary undefined external.
5345 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5346 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5347 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5349 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5350 common global variables are output.
5353 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5354 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5355 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5356 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5357 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5358 as the number of bits.
5361 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5362 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5363 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5364 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5365 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5366 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5367 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5370 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5371 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5372 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5373 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5374 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5376 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5377 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5378 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5379 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5380 the name, and a newline.
5382 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5383 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5384 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5385 You do not need to do both.
5387 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5388 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5389 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5390 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5391 common in order to save space in the object file.
5394 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5395 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5396 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5397 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5398 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5400 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5401 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5402 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5404 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5405 static variables are output.
5408 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5409 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5410 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5411 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5412 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5413 as the number of bits.
5416 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5417 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL} except that @var{decl} of the
5418 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5419 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5420 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} and
5421 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5422 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5426 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5428 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5429 This is about outputting labels.
5431 @findex assemble_name
5432 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5433 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5434 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5435 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5436 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5437 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5438 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5441 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5442 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5443 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5445 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5446 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5447 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5448 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5450 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5451 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5454 @findex assemble_name_raw
5455 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5456 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5457 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5458 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5459 that it is more efficient.
5463 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5464 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5465 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5466 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5468 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5469 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5470 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5471 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5475 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5476 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5477 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5478 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5479 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5483 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5484 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5485 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5486 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5489 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5490 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5491 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5492 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5493 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5494 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5497 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5498 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5499 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5500 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5501 @samp{.} is used instead.
5504 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5505 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5506 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5507 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5508 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5512 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5513 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5514 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5515 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5517 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5518 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5519 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5520 types at all, do not define this macro.
5523 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5524 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5525 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5526 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5527 the default is not to define this macro.
5529 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5530 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5531 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5532 types at all, do not define this macro.
5535 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5536 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5537 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5538 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5539 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5540 you should not count on this.
5542 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5543 definition of this macro is provided.
5546 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5547 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5548 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5549 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5550 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5551 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5552 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5554 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5555 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5557 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5561 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5562 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5563 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5564 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5565 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5566 representing the function.
5568 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5570 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5574 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5575 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5576 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5577 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5578 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5579 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5580 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5582 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5583 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5585 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5589 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5590 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5591 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5592 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5593 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5594 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5596 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5598 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5602 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5603 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5604 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5605 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5606 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5607 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5609 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5610 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5612 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5613 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5616 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5618 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5619 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5620 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5621 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5623 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5627 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5628 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5629 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5630 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5631 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5632 something about the size of the object.
5634 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5637 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5638 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5641 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5643 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5645 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5647 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5648 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5649 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5650 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5651 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5652 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5653 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5654 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5656 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5657 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5661 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5662 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5663 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5664 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5665 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5666 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5667 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5668 to make @var{name} weak.
5671 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5672 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5673 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5674 declaration of @code{name}.
5677 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5678 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5679 supports weak symbols.
5681 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5682 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5683 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5686 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5687 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5689 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5690 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5691 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5692 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5695 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5696 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5697 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5698 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5699 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5700 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5701 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5704 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5705 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5708 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5709 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5710 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5711 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5712 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5713 be emitted as one-only.
5716 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5718 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5719 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5720 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5721 The default is @code{0}.
5723 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5724 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5725 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5726 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5727 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5728 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5729 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5731 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5732 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5733 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5737 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5738 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5739 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5740 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5741 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5744 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5745 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5748 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5750 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5752 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5753 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5754 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5755 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5756 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5757 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5760 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5762 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5763 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5764 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5765 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5766 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5767 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5770 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5771 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5772 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5773 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5774 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5775 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5776 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5780 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5782 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5783 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5784 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5785 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5786 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5787 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5788 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5791 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5795 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5796 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5797 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5799 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5800 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5801 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5803 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5804 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5805 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5806 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5807 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5808 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5809 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5812 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5813 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5814 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5815 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5816 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5818 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5819 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5820 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5821 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5822 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5823 internal static variables in different scopes.
5825 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5826 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5827 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5828 between the name and the number will suffice.
5830 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5831 which is correct for most systems.
5834 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5835 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5836 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5839 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5840 correct for most systems.
5843 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5844 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5845 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5846 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5847 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5848 the tree nodes are available.
5851 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5852 correct for most systems.
5855 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5856 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5857 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5858 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5859 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5860 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5861 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5864 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5865 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5866 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5867 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5868 an undefined weak symbol.
5870 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5871 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5874 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5875 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5876 Objective-C methods.
5878 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5879 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5880 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5883 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5884 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5885 systems define other ways of computing names.
5887 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5888 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5889 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5890 50 characters extra.
5892 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5893 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5894 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5895 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5897 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5898 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5901 @node Initialization
5902 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5903 @cindex initialization routines
5904 @cindex termination routines
5905 @cindex constructors, output of
5906 @cindex destructors, output of
5908 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5909 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5910 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5911 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5912 @code{main} is called.
5914 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5915 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5918 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5919 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5920 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5921 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5923 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5924 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5925 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5927 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5928 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5929 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5930 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5931 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5933 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5934 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5935 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5936 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5937 pointer containing zero.
5939 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5940 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5941 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5942 list; destructors in forward order.
5944 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5945 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5946 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5947 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5948 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5949 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5950 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5951 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5953 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5954 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5955 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5956 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5957 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5959 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5960 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5961 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5962 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5963 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5966 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5969 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5970 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5971 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5972 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5973 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5975 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5976 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5977 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5978 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5979 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5980 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5982 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5985 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5986 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5987 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5988 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5989 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5990 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5992 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5993 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5994 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5995 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5996 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5997 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5998 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5999 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6000 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6001 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6002 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6003 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6004 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6005 the initialization process.
6007 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6008 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6009 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
6010 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
6011 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
6012 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
6013 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
6014 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
6015 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
6016 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
6017 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
6020 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6021 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6024 @node Macros for Initialization
6025 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6027 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6028 and termination functions:
6030 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6031 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6032 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6033 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6034 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6035 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6036 run the initialization functions.
6039 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6040 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6041 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6042 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6043 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6046 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6047 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6048 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6051 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6052 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6053 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6056 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6057 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6058 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6059 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6060 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6061 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6063 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6064 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6065 exception tables embedded in the code.
6068 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6069 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6070 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6071 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6072 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6073 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6076 @defmac INVOKE__main
6077 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6078 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6079 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6080 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6083 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6084 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6085 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6086 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6087 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6090 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6092 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6094 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6096 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6097 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6099 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6100 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6101 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6103 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6104 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6106 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6107 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6108 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6109 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6111 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6112 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6115 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6116 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6117 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6122 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6123 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6124 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6125 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6129 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6130 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6131 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6132 termination functions in shared libraries:
6135 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6136 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6139 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6140 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6141 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6142 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6143 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6144 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6145 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6148 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6149 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6150 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6151 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6152 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6153 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6156 @node Instruction Output
6157 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6159 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6160 This describes assembler instruction output.
6162 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6163 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6164 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6165 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6168 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6169 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6170 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6171 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6172 to registers using alternate names.
6175 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6176 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6177 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6178 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6179 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6180 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6181 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6182 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6184 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6185 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6186 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6187 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6191 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6192 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6193 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6195 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6196 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6197 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6198 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6199 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6200 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6201 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6202 so that it will not be output twice.
6204 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6205 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6206 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6207 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6208 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6210 @findex recog_data.operand
6211 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6212 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6214 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6218 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6219 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6220 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6221 they will be output differently.
6223 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6224 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6225 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6226 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6227 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6228 by changing the contents of the vector.
6230 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6231 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6232 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6233 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6234 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6235 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6237 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6240 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6242 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6243 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6244 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6247 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6248 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6249 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6250 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6251 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6252 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6253 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6256 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6257 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6258 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6259 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6261 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6262 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6263 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6267 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6268 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6269 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6270 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6271 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6275 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6276 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6277 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6278 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6280 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6281 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6282 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6283 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6284 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6288 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6289 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6290 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6291 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6292 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6293 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6296 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6297 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6298 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6301 @findex final_sequence
6302 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6303 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6304 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6305 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6306 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6310 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6311 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6312 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6313 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6314 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6315 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6316 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6317 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6318 files can define these macros differently.
6321 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6322 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6323 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6324 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6325 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6326 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6327 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6328 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6329 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6330 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6331 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6334 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6335 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6336 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6337 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6340 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6342 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6345 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6346 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6347 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6348 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6349 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6350 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6351 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6352 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6353 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6355 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6356 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6357 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6359 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6360 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6361 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6362 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6363 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6364 opcodes or operand order.
6367 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6368 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6369 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6370 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6374 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6375 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6376 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6377 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6381 @node Dispatch Tables
6382 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6384 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6385 This concerns dispatch tables.
6387 @cindex dispatch table
6388 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6389 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6390 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6391 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6392 definitions of these labels are output using
6393 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6394 way here. For example,
6397 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6398 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6401 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6402 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6403 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6404 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6405 mode and flags can be read.
6408 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6409 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6410 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6412 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6413 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6414 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6415 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6419 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6423 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6424 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6425 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6426 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6427 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6428 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6430 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6433 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6434 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6437 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6438 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6439 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6440 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6441 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6442 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6443 of the preceding label.
6445 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6449 @hook TARGET_ASM_POST_CFI_STARTPROC
6451 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6453 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6455 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6457 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6459 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6461 @node Exception Region Output
6462 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6464 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6466 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6469 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6470 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6471 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6472 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6473 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6475 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6476 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6479 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6480 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6481 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6482 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6484 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6485 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6486 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6487 be marked as not to be collected.
6490 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6491 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6492 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6493 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6494 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6497 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6498 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6499 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6502 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6503 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6504 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6505 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6506 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6507 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6510 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6511 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6512 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6513 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6514 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6515 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6516 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6518 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6519 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6520 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6522 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6523 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6524 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6525 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6526 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6527 depending on this setting.
6529 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6530 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6531 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6532 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6533 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6536 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6537 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6538 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6539 command-line option processing.
6542 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6543 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6544 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6545 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6548 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6549 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6550 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6551 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6552 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6553 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6556 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6557 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6558 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6559 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6560 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6561 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{DWARF}. Only applicable if
6562 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6565 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6567 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6569 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6571 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6573 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6575 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6577 @node Alignment Output
6578 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6580 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6581 This describes commands for alignment.
6583 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6584 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6585 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6587 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6588 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6591 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6592 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6593 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6594 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6597 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6598 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6601 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6602 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6606 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6607 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6608 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6610 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6611 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6614 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6615 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6616 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6617 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6620 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6621 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6622 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6623 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6625 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6626 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6627 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6628 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6631 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6632 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6633 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6634 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6635 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6638 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6639 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6640 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6641 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6642 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6646 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6647 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6648 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6649 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6652 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6653 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6654 for padding, if necessary.
6657 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6658 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6659 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6660 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6661 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6662 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6666 @node Debugging Info
6667 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6669 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6670 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6673 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6674 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6675 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6676 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6677 * DWARF:: Macros for DWARF format.
6678 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6682 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6684 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6685 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6687 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6688 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6689 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6690 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6691 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6692 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6693 compiler and another for DBX@.
6695 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6696 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6697 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6698 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6699 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6701 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6702 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6703 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6706 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6707 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6708 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6709 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6710 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6711 that produce debugging output for DBX and allow the frame-pointer to be
6712 eliminated when the @option{-g} option is used.
6715 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6716 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6717 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6721 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6722 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6723 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6724 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6725 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6726 @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG},
6727 and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6729 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6730 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6731 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6732 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6733 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6735 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6736 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6737 @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6741 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6743 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6744 These are specific options for DBX output.
6746 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6747 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6748 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6751 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6752 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6753 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6756 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6757 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6758 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6759 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6760 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6761 if there is any occasion to.
6764 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6765 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6766 in the text section.
6769 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6770 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6771 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6772 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6773 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6776 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6777 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6778 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6779 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6780 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6784 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6785 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6786 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6787 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6788 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6791 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6792 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6793 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6794 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6795 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6798 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6799 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6800 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6801 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6802 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6803 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6804 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6805 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6808 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6809 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6810 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6811 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6812 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6813 if backslash is correct for your system.
6816 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6817 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6818 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6822 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6823 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6824 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6827 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6828 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6829 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6830 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6833 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6834 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6835 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6836 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6839 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6840 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6841 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6842 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6845 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6846 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6847 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6848 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6852 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6853 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6854 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6855 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6856 an absolute address.
6859 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6860 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6861 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6862 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6865 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6866 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6867 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6868 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6869 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6870 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6871 number for a type number.
6875 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6877 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6878 These are hooks for DBX format.
6880 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6881 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6882 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6883 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6884 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6885 unique labels in the assembly output.
6887 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6888 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6891 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6892 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6893 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6894 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6895 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6898 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6899 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6900 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6901 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6904 @node File Names and DBX
6905 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6907 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6908 This describes file names in DBX format.
6910 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6911 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6912 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6913 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6914 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6916 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6917 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6919 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6920 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6921 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6922 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6925 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6926 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6927 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6928 the beginning of the file.
6931 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6932 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6933 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6934 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6935 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6938 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6939 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6940 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6941 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6943 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6944 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6947 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6948 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6949 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6950 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6951 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6956 @subsection Macros for DWARF Output
6958 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6959 Here are macros for DWARF output.
6961 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6962 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6963 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6965 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6967 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6968 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6969 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6970 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6971 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6974 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6975 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6976 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6977 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6978 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6979 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6982 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6984 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6985 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6986 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6987 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6990 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_VIEW_DEBUG_INFO
6991 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler supports view
6992 assignment and verification in @code{.loc}. If it does not, but the
6993 user enables location views, the compiler may have to fallback to
6994 internal line number tables.
6997 @hook TARGET_RESET_LOCATION_VIEW
6999 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
7001 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
7003 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
7005 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
7007 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7008 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7009 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7012 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7013 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7014 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g.@: instruction
7015 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
7018 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
7019 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
7020 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
7021 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
7022 given @var{section}.
7025 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7026 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7027 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7030 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7031 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
7032 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7035 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7036 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7037 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7038 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7039 is referenced by a function.
7042 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7046 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7048 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7049 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7051 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7052 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7053 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7054 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7055 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7056 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7057 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7060 @node Floating Point
7061 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7062 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7063 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7065 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7066 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7067 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7068 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7069 doing the compilation.
7071 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7072 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7073 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7074 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7075 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7076 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7077 target floating point formats are identical.
7079 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7080 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7081 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7082 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7084 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7085 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7086 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7087 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7091 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7092 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7095 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7096 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7097 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7100 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7101 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7102 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7103 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7104 defined by the C language for both.
7107 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7108 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7111 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7112 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7115 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7116 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7119 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7120 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7123 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7124 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7127 @node Mode Switching
7128 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7129 @cindex mode switching
7130 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7132 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7133 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7134 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7136 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7137 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7138 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7139 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7140 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7141 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you cannot put this into instruction emitting
7142 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7144 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7145 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7146 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7147 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7148 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7149 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7150 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7154 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7155 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7156 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7157 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7158 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7159 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7160 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7162 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7163 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7164 switch is needed / supplied.
7167 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7169 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7171 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7173 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7175 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7177 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7179 @node Target Attributes
7180 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7181 @cindex target attributes
7182 @cindex machine attributes
7183 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7185 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7186 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7187 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7189 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7191 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7193 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7195 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7197 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7199 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7201 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7203 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7204 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7205 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7206 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7207 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7208 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7209 on this implementation detail.
7212 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7214 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_GENERIC_ATTRIBUTE
7216 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7218 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7220 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7222 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7224 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7226 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7228 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7230 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7232 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7234 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7236 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7239 @section Emulating TLS
7240 @cindex Emulated TLS
7242 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7243 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7244 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7245 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7246 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7249 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7250 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7251 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7252 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7254 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7256 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7258 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7260 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7262 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7264 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7266 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7268 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7270 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7272 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7274 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7275 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7276 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7278 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7279 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7280 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7281 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7284 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7290 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7291 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7292 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7294 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7295 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7296 later in the function.
7298 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7299 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7300 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7303 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7304 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7306 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7308 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7310 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7312 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7315 @section C++ ABI parameters
7316 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7318 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7320 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7322 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7324 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7326 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7328 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7330 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7332 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7334 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7336 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7338 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7340 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7342 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7344 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7346 @node D Language and ABI
7347 @section D ABI parameters
7348 @cindex parameters, d abi
7350 @hook TARGET_D_CPU_VERSIONS
7352 @hook TARGET_D_OS_VERSIONS
7354 @hook TARGET_D_CRITSEC_SIZE
7356 @node Named Address Spaces
7357 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7358 @cindex named address spaces
7360 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7361 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7362 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7363 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7364 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7365 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7366 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7367 @code{const} type attributes.
7369 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7370 pointers to the generic address space.
7372 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7373 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7374 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7375 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7376 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7377 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7378 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7381 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7382 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7385 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7386 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7387 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7388 named address space #1:
7390 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7391 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7394 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7396 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7398 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7400 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7402 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7404 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7406 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7408 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7410 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7412 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7415 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7416 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7418 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7419 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7421 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7422 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7423 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7424 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7425 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7426 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7427 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7430 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7431 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7432 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7433 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7434 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7435 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7436 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7439 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7440 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7441 elements of a jump-table should have.
7444 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7445 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7446 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7447 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7448 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7449 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7450 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7451 flags can be updated.
7454 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7455 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7456 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7457 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7458 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7462 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7464 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7465 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7466 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register. To be
7467 more explicit, if you start with a pair of @code{word_mode} registers with
7468 known values and you do a subword, for example @code{QImode}, addition on
7469 the low part of the registers, then the compiler may consider that the
7470 result has a known value in @code{word_mode} too if the macro is defined
7471 to 1. Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7474 @hook TARGET_MIN_ARITHMETIC_PRECISION
7476 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7477 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7478 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7479 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7480 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7481 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7482 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7483 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7485 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7486 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7487 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7488 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7489 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7491 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7492 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7493 of these hard registers @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns false
7494 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7495 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7497 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7498 mode, @code{TARGET_CAN_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7499 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7500 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7503 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7504 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7508 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7511 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7512 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7515 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7516 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7517 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7518 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7519 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7523 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7524 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7525 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7526 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7527 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7528 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7529 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7530 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7531 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7532 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7533 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7535 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7536 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7537 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7539 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7540 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7541 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7542 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7543 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7545 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7548 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7549 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7551 @hook TARGET_TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7553 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7555 @hook TARGET_SETJMP_PRESERVES_NONVOLATILE_REGS_P
7557 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7558 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7559 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7560 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7561 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7562 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7564 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7565 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7566 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7567 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7568 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7569 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7570 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7571 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7574 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7575 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7576 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7577 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7578 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7579 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7580 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7584 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7591 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7595 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7596 tested into the sign bit.
7598 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7599 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7600 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7601 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7602 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7603 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7605 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7606 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7607 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7612 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7613 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7614 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7615 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7616 combine the normalization with other operations.
7619 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7620 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7624 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7625 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7629 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7632 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7633 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7634 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7635 those cases, e.g., one matching
7638 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7641 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7642 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7643 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7644 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7645 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7646 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7647 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7648 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7650 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7651 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7652 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7655 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7656 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7657 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7658 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7659 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7663 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7664 A C expression that gives an rtx representing the nonzero true element
7665 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7666 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7667 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7668 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7669 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7670 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7671 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7675 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7676 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7677 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7678 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7679 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7680 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7681 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7682 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7683 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7684 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7687 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7688 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7690 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7691 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7692 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7693 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7695 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7696 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7697 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7698 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7703 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7704 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7705 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7706 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7707 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7709 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7710 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7711 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7715 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7716 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7717 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7718 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7719 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7720 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7721 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7724 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7725 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7726 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7727 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7728 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7729 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7731 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7732 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7733 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7736 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7738 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7740 @defmac SYSTEM_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7741 Define this macro if the system header files do not support C++@.
7742 This macro handles system header files by pretending that system
7743 header files are enclosed in @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7748 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7749 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7750 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7751 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7752 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7753 setup required for the pragmas.
7755 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7756 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7757 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7759 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7760 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7762 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7763 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7764 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7767 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7768 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7770 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7771 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7772 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7776 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7779 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7780 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7781 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7782 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7783 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7784 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7785 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7786 arguments of pragmas registered with
7787 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7788 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7790 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7791 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7792 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7793 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7794 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7795 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7796 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7797 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7798 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7799 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7800 how to build this object file.
7803 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7804 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7805 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7808 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7809 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7810 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7811 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7812 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7815 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7816 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7817 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7818 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7819 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7822 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7823 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7824 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7825 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7826 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7827 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7828 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7829 you should define this macro.
7831 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7834 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7835 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7836 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7837 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7838 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7839 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7840 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7841 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7842 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7845 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7848 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7849 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7850 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7851 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7852 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7853 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7855 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7858 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7860 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7861 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7862 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7863 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7864 separate math library.
7866 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7869 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7870 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7871 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7873 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7877 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7878 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7879 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7880 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7881 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7882 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7883 for cross-profiling.
7886 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7888 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7889 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7890 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7891 1 if it does use cc0.
7894 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7895 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7896 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7897 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7898 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7899 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7900 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7901 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7904 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7905 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7906 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7907 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7908 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7911 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7912 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7913 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7914 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7915 about the currently processed blocks.
7918 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7919 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7920 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7921 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7922 to by @var{ce_info}.
7925 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7926 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7927 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7928 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7929 to by @var{ce_info}.
7932 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7933 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7934 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7935 to by @var{ce_info}.
7938 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7940 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7942 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7944 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7946 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7948 @hook TARGET_CHECK_BUILTIN_CALL
7950 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7952 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7954 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7956 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7958 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7960 @hook TARGET_PREDICT_DOLOOP_P
7962 @hook TARGET_HAVE_COUNT_REG_DECR_P
7964 @hook TARGET_DOLOOP_COST_FOR_GENERIC
7966 @hook TARGET_DOLOOP_COST_FOR_ADDRESS
7968 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7970 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7972 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7974 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7976 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7978 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7980 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
7982 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
7984 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
7985 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
7986 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
7987 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
7990 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
7991 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
7992 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
7993 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
7997 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
7998 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
7999 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8000 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8001 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8005 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8007 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8009 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
8011 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
8013 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8015 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8016 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8017 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8018 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8019 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8020 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8021 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8022 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8025 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8026 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8027 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8028 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8029 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8032 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8033 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8034 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8035 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8036 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8037 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8040 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8041 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8042 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8043 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8044 that are different from @option{-I}.
8047 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8048 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8049 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8050 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8051 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8052 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8055 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8056 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8057 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8058 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8061 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8062 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8063 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8066 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8067 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8068 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8069 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8070 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8073 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8074 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8075 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8078 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8079 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8080 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8081 and scanf formatter settings.
8084 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8086 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8088 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8090 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8092 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8094 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8096 @hook TARGET_VERIFY_TYPE_CONTEXT
8099 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8100 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8103 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8104 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8105 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8106 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8107 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8110 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8112 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8114 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8116 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8118 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8120 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8122 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8124 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8126 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8128 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8130 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8132 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8134 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8136 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8137 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8138 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8139 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8140 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8141 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8144 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8145 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8146 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8147 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8148 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8152 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8153 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8154 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8156 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8157 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8158 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8159 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8160 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8161 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8162 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8163 not really a large change.
8166 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8167 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8171 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8172 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8175 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8176 maintainer is familiar with.
8180 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8182 @hook TARGET_SPECULATION_SAFE_VALUE
8184 @hook TARGET_RUN_TARGET_SELFTESTS